blob: 25baf1bf640052db2dc4bd92e2c7a9bd9e32f00b [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000026#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000027#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000039#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000041#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000043#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000044#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
45#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000049#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000050#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000051#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000052using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000053using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000054
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000055#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
56
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000057// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
58// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
59// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
60// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000061static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
62 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
63 cl::desc(
64 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
65
66static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
67 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
68 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000069
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000070static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000071 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
72 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000073
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000074static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
75 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
76 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000077
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000078static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
79 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
80 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
81 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
82 "predicated store"));
83
84static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
85 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
86 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
87 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
88
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +000089static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
90 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
91 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
92 "executed"));
93
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +000094static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
95 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
96 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
97 "speculatively executed instructions"));
98
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000099STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000100STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
101 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
102STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
103 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
104STATISTIC(
105 NumLookupTablesHoles,
106 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000107STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000108STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
109 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000110STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000111
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000112namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000113// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
114// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
115// cases composing the case group.
116typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000117 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000118// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
119// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
120// switch for that PHI.
121typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000122
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000123/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
124struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
125 ConstantInt *Value;
126 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000127
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000128 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000129 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
130
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
132 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
133 return Value < RHS.Value;
134 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000135
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000136 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
137};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000138
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000140 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000141 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000142 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000143 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000144 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000145 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000146 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
147 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000148 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000149 BasicBlock *Pred,
150 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000151 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
152 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000153
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000154 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000155 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000156 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
157 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000158 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000159 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000160 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000161 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
163 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000164
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000166 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000167 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
168 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
169 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
170 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
172};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000173}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000174
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000175/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000176/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000177static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000178 if (SI1 == SI2)
179 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000180
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000181 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
182 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
183 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
184 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
185 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000186 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000187
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000188 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
189 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
190 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000191 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
192 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
193 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
194 return false;
195 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000196
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000197 return true;
198}
199
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000200/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
201/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
202/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000203static bool
204isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
205 Instruction *Cond,
206 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
207 if (SI1 == SI2)
208 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000209 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
210
211 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000212 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000213 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
214 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
215 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
216 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000217 if (!Ci2)
218 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000219 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
220 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
221 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
222 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
223 return false;
224
225 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
226 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000227 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000228 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
229 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
230 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000231 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
232 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000233 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000234 return false;
235 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
236 }
237 return true;
238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
241/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
242/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
243/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000244static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
245 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000246 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
247 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000248
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000249 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000250 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000251 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000252}
253
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000254/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
255/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
256/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000257/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000258static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000259 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000260 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000261 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000262 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000263}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000264
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000265/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
266/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000267/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
268/// which works well enough for us.
269///
270/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000271/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
272/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
273/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
274/// set and true is returned.
275///
276/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
277/// Select whose cost is 2.
278///
279/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
280/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
281/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000282static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000283 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000284 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000285 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
286 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000287 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
288 // so limit the recursion depth.
289 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
290 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
291 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
292 return false;
293
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000294 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000295 if (!I) {
296 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
297 // can be executed unconditionally.
298 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
299 if (C->canTrap())
300 return false;
301 return true;
302 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000303 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000304
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000305 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000306 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000307 if (PBB == BB)
308 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000309
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000310 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
311 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000312 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
313 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000314 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000315 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000316
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000317 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
318 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000319 if (!AggressiveInsts)
320 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000321
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000322 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000323 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
324 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000325
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000326 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
327 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
328 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000329 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000330 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000331
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000332 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000333
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000334 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
335 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
336 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
337 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
338 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
339 // enabled further IR optimizations.
340 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
341 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000342 return false;
343
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000344 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
345 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000346
347 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
348 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000349 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000350 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
351 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 return false;
353 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
354 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000355 return true;
356}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000357
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000358/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000359/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000360static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000361 // Normal constant int.
362 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000363 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000364 return CI;
365
366 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
367 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000368 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000369
370 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
371 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
372 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
373
374 // IntToPtr const int.
375 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
376 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
377 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
378 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
379 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
380 return CI;
381 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000382 return cast<ConstantInt>(
383 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000384 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000385 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000386}
387
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000388namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000389
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000390/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
391/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
392/// structure.
393/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
394/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
395/// representing the different cases for the switch.
396/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
397/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
398/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
399/// fail.
400struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000401 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000402 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
403 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
404 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
405 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000406
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000407 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000408 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
409 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
410 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000411 }
412
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000413 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000414 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000415 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000416 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000417
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000418private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000419 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
420 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
421 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000422 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
423 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424 CompValue = NewVal;
425 return (CompValue != nullptr);
426 }
427
428 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
429 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
430 /// match depending on isEQ).
431 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
432 /// against is placed in CompValue.
433 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
434 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000435 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000436 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
437 ICmpInst *ICI;
438 ConstantInt *C;
439 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000440 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000441 return false;
442 }
443
444 Value *RHSVal;
445 ConstantInt *RHSC;
446
447 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000448 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000449 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000450 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000451 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
452 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
453 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000454 if (Not.isPowerOf2() && C->getValue().isPowerOf2() &&
455 Not != C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000456 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000457 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000458 return false;
459
460 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000461 Vals.push_back(
462 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(), C->getValue() | Not));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000463 UsedICmps++;
464 return true;
465 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000466 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000467
468 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000469 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000470 return false;
471
472 UsedICmps++;
473 Vals.push_back(C);
474 return ICI->getOperand(0);
475 }
476
477 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000478 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
479 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000480
481 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
482 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
483 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000484 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000485 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
486 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
487 }
488
489 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
490 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
491 // x != 0 && x != 1.
492 if (!isEQ)
493 Span = Span.inverse();
494
495 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
496 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
497 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000498 }
499
500 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000501 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000502 return false;
503
504 // Add all values from the range to the set
505 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
506 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000507
508 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000509 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000510 }
511
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000512 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000513 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
514 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
515 /// vector.
516 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000517 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000518 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
519 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000520
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000521 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
522 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000523 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000524
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000525 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000526 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000527 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000528
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000529 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000530 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000531
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000532 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
533 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
534 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000535 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
536 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
537 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
538 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000539 continue;
540 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000541
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000542 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000543 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000544 // Match succeed, continue the loop
545 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000546 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000547
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000548 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
549 // comparison against the same value as the others.
550 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
551 if (!Extra) {
552 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000553 continue;
554 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000555 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
556 CompValue = nullptr;
557 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000558 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000559 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000560};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000561}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000562
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000563static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000564 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000565 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
566 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
567 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
568 if (BI->isConditional())
569 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000570 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
571 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000572 }
573
574 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000575 if (Cond)
576 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000577}
578
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000579/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000580/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000581Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000582 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000583 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
584 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
585 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000586 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
587 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
588 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000589 CV = SI->getCondition();
590 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000591 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000592 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000593 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000594 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000595 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000596
597 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000598 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000599 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
600 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000601 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000602 CV = Ptr;
603 }
604 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000605 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000606}
607
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000608/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000609/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000610BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
611 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000612 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000613 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000614 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
615 ++i)
616 Cases.push_back(
617 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000618 return SI->getDefaultDest();
619 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000620
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000621 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000622 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000623 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000624 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
625 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000626 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000627}
628
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000629/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000630/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000631static void
632EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
633 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000634 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000635}
636
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000637/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000638static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
639 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000640 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
641
642 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
643 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
644 std::swap(V1, V2);
645
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000646 if (V1->size() == 0)
647 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000648 if (V1->size() == 1) {
649 // Just scan V2.
650 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
651 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
652 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
653 return true;
654 }
655
656 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
657 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
658 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
659 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
660 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
661 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
662 return true;
663 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
664 ++i1;
665 else
666 ++i2;
667 }
668 return false;
669}
670
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000671/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
672/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
673/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
674/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
675/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000676bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
677 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000678 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000679 if (!PredVal)
680 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000681
682 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
683 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000684 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
685 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000686
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000687 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
688 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
689
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000690 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000691 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000692 BasicBlock *PredDef =
693 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
694 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000695
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000696 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000697 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000698 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000699 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000700
701 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
702 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
703 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
704 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
705 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
706 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000707 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000708 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000709
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000710 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
711 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
712 // uncond br.
713 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
714 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000715 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000716 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000717
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000718 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000719 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000720
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000721 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000722 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
723 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000724
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000725 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
726 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000727 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000728
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000729 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
730 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000731 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000732 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
733 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000734
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000735 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000736 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000737
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000738 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
739 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000740 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000741 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
742 if (HasWeight)
743 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
744 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000745 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000746 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
747 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000748 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
749 --i;
750 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000751 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000752 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000753 Weights.pop_back();
754 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000755 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
756 SI->removeCase(i);
757 }
758 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000759 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000760 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000761 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
762 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000763
764 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000765 return true;
766 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000767
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000768 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
769 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000770 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000771 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000772 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
773 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000774 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000775 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000776 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
777 }
778 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000779
780 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
781 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000782 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000783 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
784 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
785 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
786 break;
787 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000788
789 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000790 if (!TheRealDest)
791 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000792
793 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
794 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000795 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
796 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
797 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000798 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000799 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000800
801 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000802 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000803 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000804
805 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000806 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
807 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000808
809 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
810 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000811}
812
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000813namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000814/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
815/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
816/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
817struct ConstantIntOrdering {
818 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
819 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
820 }
821};
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000822}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000823
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000824static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
825 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
826 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
827 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000828 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000829 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000830 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000831}
832
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000833static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000834 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000835 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000836 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000837 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
838
839 return false;
840}
841
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000842/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
843/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
844/// metadata.
845static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
846 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000847 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000848 assert(MD);
849 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000850 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000851 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000852 }
853
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000854 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
855 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
856 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000857 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000858 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
859 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
860 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
861 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000862 }
863}
864
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000865/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000866static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000867 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
868 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
869 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
870 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
871 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000872 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000873}
874
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000875/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
876/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000877/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
878/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000879bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
880 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000881 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000882 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000883 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
884 bool Changed = false;
885
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000886 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000887 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000888 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000889
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000890 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
891 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000892 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000893
894 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
895 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000896 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000897 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
898
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000899 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000900 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
901
902 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
903 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
904 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000905 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000906
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000907 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
908 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000909 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
910 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
911
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000912 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000913 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000914 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000915 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
916 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
917 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000918 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
919 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
920 // successor's weights
921 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000922
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000923 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000924 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000925 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000926 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000927 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
928 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
929 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000930 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000931
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000932 if (PredDefault == BB) {
933 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
934 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000935 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000936 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
937 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
938 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
939 else {
940 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
941 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000942
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000943 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
944 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000945 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
946 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000947 Weights.pop_back();
948 }
949
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000950 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000951 --i;
952 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000953 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000954
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000955 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000956 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
957 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
958 PredDefault = BBDefault;
959 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
960 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000961
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000962 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
963 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000964 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
965 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
966 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
967 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
968 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000969 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
970 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
971 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
972 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000973 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
974 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000975 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000976 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000977
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000978 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
979 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
980 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
981 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
982 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
983 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
984 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
985 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000986 } else {
987 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
988 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
989 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000990 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
991 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000992 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
993 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
994 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000995
996 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000997 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
998 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000999 Weights.pop_back();
1000 }
1001
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001002 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1003 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001004 --i;
1005 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001006 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001007
1008 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1009 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001010 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1011 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1012 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001013 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1014 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001015 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1016 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001017 PTIHandled.erase(
1018 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001019 }
1020
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001021 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1022 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001023 for (std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator
1024 I = PTIHandled.begin(),
1025 E = PTIHandled.end();
1026 I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001027 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1028 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001029 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001030 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001031 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001032 }
1033
1034 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1035 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1036 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001037 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1038 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001039
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001040 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001041 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001042 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001043 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001044 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001045 }
1046
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001047 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001048 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1049 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001050 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001051 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1052 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001053
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001054 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1055 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1056 FitWeights(Weights);
1057
1058 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1059
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001060 NewSI->setMetadata(
1061 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1062 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001063 }
1064
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001065 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001066
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001067 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1068 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1069 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001070 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001071 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1072 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001073 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001074 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001075 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001076 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1077 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001078 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001079 }
1080 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1081 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001082
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001083 Changed = true;
1084 }
1085 }
1086 return Changed;
1087}
1088
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001089// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1090// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1091// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001092static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1093 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001094 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001095 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001096 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001097 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1098 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1099 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001100 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001101 return false;
1102 }
1103 }
1104 }
1105 return true;
1106}
1107
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001108static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1109
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001110/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1111/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1112/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001113static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001114 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001115 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1116 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1117 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1118 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1119 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001120 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1121 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001122
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001123 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1124 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1125
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001126 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001127 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1128 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1129 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1130 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1131 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001132 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001133 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001134 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001135 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001136 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001137 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001138 return false;
1139
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001140 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001141
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001142 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001143 do {
1144 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1145 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1146 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1147 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001148
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001149 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1150 return Changed;
1151
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001152 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1153 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1154 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001155 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001156 if (!I2->use_empty())
1157 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001158 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001159 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1160 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1161 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1162 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1163 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1164 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1165 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1166 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1167 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1168 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001169 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001170 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001171 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001172
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001173 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1174 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001175 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1176 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1177 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1178 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1179 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001180 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001181 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001182 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001183 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001184 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001185
1186 return true;
1187
1188HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001189 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1190 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001191 return Changed;
1192
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001193 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001194 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001195 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001196 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1197 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1198 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1199 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1200 continue;
1201
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001202 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1203 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1204 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1205 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001206 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001207
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001208 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001209 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001210 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001211 return Changed;
1212 }
1213 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001214
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001215 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001216 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001217 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001218 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001219 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1220 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001221 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001222 }
1223
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001224 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001225 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1226 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1227 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1228 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001229 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001230 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001231 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001232 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001233 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001234 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1235 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001236 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1237 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001238
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001239 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1240 // that determines the right value.
1241 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001242 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001243 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1244 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1245 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001246
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001247 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1248 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1249 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1250 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001251 }
1252 }
1253
1254 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001255 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1256 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001257
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001258 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001259 return true;
1260}
1261
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001262/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001263/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1264/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1265/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1266static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1267 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1268 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1269 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1270
1271 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1272 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001273 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1274 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1275 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001276 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001277 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1278 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1279 return false;
1280 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001281 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1282 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1283 return false;
1284
1285 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001286 SmallDenseMap<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, PHINode *> JointValueMap;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001287 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001288 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); I != E; ++I) {
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001289 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1290 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001291 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001292 JointValueMap[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)] = PN;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001293 } else {
1294 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1295 break;
1296 }
1297 }
1298 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1299 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001300
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001301 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1302 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1303 // instructions in an identical order.
1304 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001305 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(),
1306 RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1307 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001308 // Skip debug info.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001309 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1))
1310 ++RI1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001311 if (RI1 == RE1)
1312 return false;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001313 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2))
1314 ++RI2;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001315 if (RI2 == RE2)
1316 return false;
1317 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1318 ++RI1;
1319 ++RI2;
1320
1321 bool Changed = false;
1322 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1323 // Skip debug info.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001324 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1))
1325 ++RI1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001326 if (RI1 == RE1)
1327 return Changed;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001328 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2))
1329 ++RI2;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001330 if (RI2 == RE2)
1331 return Changed;
1332
1333 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001334 auto InstPair = std::make_pair(I1, I2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001335 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1336 // perform the same operation.
1337 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001338 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) ||
1339 isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) || I1->isEHPad() || I2->isEHPad() ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001340 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1341 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1342 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001343 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() || !JointValueMap.count(InstPair))
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001344 return Changed;
1345
1346 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001347 // TODO: Add support of communativity.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001348 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1349 bool SwapOpnds = false;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001350 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 && ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001351 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1352 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1353 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1354 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1355 SwapOpnds = true;
1356 }
1357 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1358 if (SwapOpnds)
1359 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1360 return Changed;
1361 }
1362
1363 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1364 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1365 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001366 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001367 unsigned Op1Idx = ~0U;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001368 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1369 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1370 continue;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001371 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or if
1372 // we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001373 if (Op1Idx != ~0U || isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001374 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1375 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1376 if (SwapOpnds)
1377 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1378 return Changed;
1379 }
1380 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1381 Op1Idx = I;
1382 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1383 }
1384
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001385 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n");
1386 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n");
1387
1388 // We insert the pair of different operands to JointValueMap and
1389 // remove (I1, I2) from JointValueMap.
1390 if (Op1Idx != ~0U) {
1391 auto &NewPN = JointValueMap[std::make_pair(DifferentOp1, DifferentOp2)];
1392 if (!NewPN) {
1393 NewPN =
1394 PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001395 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001396 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1397 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1398 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1399 }
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001400 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1401 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001402 }
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001403 PHINode *OldPN = JointValueMap[InstPair];
1404 JointValueMap.erase(InstPair);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001405
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001406 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1407 // instruction in the basic block down.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00001408 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == &BB1->front()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == &BB2->front());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001409 // Sink the instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001410 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd->getIterator(),
1411 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001412 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1413 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1414 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1415
1416 if (!I2->use_empty())
1417 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1418 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001419 // TODO: Use combineMetadata here to preserve what metadata we can
1420 // (analogous to the hoisting case above).
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001421 I2->eraseFromParent();
1422
1423 if (UpdateRE1)
1424 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1425 if (UpdateRE2)
1426 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001427 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001428 NumSinkCommons++;
1429 Changed = true;
1430 }
1431 return Changed;
1432}
1433
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001434/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1435/// conditional block.
1436///
1437/// We are looking for code like the following:
1438/// BrBB:
1439/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1440/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1441/// ... // function).
1442/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1443/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1444/// ThenBB:
1445/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1446/// br label EndBB
1447/// EndBB:
1448/// ...
1449/// We are going to transform this into:
1450/// BrBB:
1451/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1452/// ... //
1453/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1454/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1455/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1456/// ...
1457///
1458/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1459/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001460static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1461 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001462 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1463 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001464 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001465
1466 // Volatile or atomic.
1467 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001468 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001469
1470 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1471
1472 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001473 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001474 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(), RE = BrBB->rend();
1475 RI != RE && MaxNumInstToLookAt; ++RI) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001476 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001477 // Skip debug info.
1478 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1479 continue;
1480 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001481
1482 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1483 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001484 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001485
1486 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1487 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1488 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1489 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1490 return SI->getValueOperand();
1491 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001492 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001493 }
1494
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001495 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001496}
1497
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001498/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001499///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001500/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1501/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1502/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1503/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1504/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1505///
1506/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1507/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1508/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1509/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1510///
1511///
1512/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1513/// \code
1514/// BB:
1515/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1516/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1517/// ThenBB:
1518/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001519/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001520/// EndBB:
1521/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1522/// ...
1523/// \endcode
1524///
1525/// Into this IR:
1526/// \code
1527/// BB:
1528/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1529/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1530/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1531/// ...
1532/// \endcode
1533///
1534/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001535static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001536 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001537 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1538 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1539 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1540 return false;
1541
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001542 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1543 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1544
1545 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1546 // to swap the select operands later.
1547 bool Invert = false;
1548 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1549 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1550 Invert = true;
1551 }
1552 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1553
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001554 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1555 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1556 // - They are defined in BB, and
1557 // - They have no side effects, and
1558 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1559 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1560
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001561 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001562 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1563 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001564 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001565 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001566 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001567 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001568 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001569 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1570 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001571
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001572 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001573 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001574 ++SpeculationCost;
1575 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001576 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001577
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001578 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001579 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1580 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1581 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001582 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001583 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001584 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1585 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001586 return false;
1587
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001588 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1589 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1590 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1591
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001592 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001593 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001594 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001595 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001596 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001597 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001598 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1599
1600 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001601 }
1602 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001603
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001604 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1605 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1606 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001607 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1608 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1609 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001610 I != E; ++I)
1611 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001612 ++SpeculationCost;
1613 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001614 return false;
1615 }
1616
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001617 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1618 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001619 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001620 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001621 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1622 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001623
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001624 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001625 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001626 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001627 continue;
1628
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001629 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1630 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1631 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1632 return false;
1633
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001634 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001635 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1636 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1637 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001638 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1639
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001640 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1641 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001642 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001643 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1644 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001645 unsigned MaxCost =
1646 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001647 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001648 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001649
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001650 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1651 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1652 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001653 // constant expression.
1654 ++SpeculationCost;
1655 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001656 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001657 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001658
1659 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1660 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001661 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001662 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001663
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001664 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001665 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001666
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001667 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1668 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001669 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001670 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1671 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1672 if (Invert)
1673 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00001674 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
1675 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001676 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1677 }
1678
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001679 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1680 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001681 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001682 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1683
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001684 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001685 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1686 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001687
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001688 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001689 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001690 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1691 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1692 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1693 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1694 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1695 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1696
1697 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1698 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1699 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001700
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001701 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001702 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1703 // destinations were inverted.
1704 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001705 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001706 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00001707 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
1708 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001709 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1710 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001711 }
1712
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001713 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001714 return true;
1715}
1716
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001717/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001718static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1719 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001720 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001721
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001722 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001723 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1724 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001725 if (Size > 10)
1726 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001727 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001728
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001729 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001730 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001731 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1732 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001733 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
1734 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001735 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001736
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001737 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1738 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001739
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001740 return true;
1741}
1742
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001743/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1744/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1745/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001746static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001747 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1748 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001749 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1750 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001751 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1752 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001753
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001754 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1755 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001756 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001757 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001758 }
1759
1760 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001761 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
1762 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001763
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001764 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
1765 if (llvm::any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
1766 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
1767 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
1768 }))
1769 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001770
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001771 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1772 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001773 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001774 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001775 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
1776 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001777
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001778 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1779 // branch to RealDest.
1780 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1781 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001782
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001783 if (RealDest == BB)
1784 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001785 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001786 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
1787 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001788
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001789 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1790 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1791 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1792 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001793 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
1794 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
1795 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001796 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001797
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001798 // Update PHI nodes.
1799 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001800
1801 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1802 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1803 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1804 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001805 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001806 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1807 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1808 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1809 continue;
1810 }
1811 // Clone the instruction.
1812 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001813 if (BBI->hasName())
1814 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001815
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001816 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001817 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
1818 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001819 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1820 *i = PI->second;
1821 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001822
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001823 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001824 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001825 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001826 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001827 } else {
1828 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1829 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1830 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001831 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001832 }
1833 }
1834
1835 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1836 // to EdgeBB instead.
1837 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1838 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1839 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1840 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1841 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1842 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001843
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001844 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001845 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001846 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001847
1848 return false;
1849}
1850
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001851/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
1852/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001853static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1854 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001855 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1856 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1857 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1858 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1859 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1860 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001861 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1862 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1863 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001864 if (!IfCond ||
1865 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1866 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1867 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001868
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001869 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1870 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1871 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1872 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1873 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1874 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1875 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1876 if (NumPhis > 2)
1877 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001878
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001879 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1880 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1881 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001882 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001883 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1884 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001885 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1886 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001887
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001888 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1889 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001890 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001891 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001892 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001893 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001894 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001895
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001896 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001897 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001898 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001899 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001900 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001901 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001902
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001903 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001904 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1905 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001906 if (!PN)
1907 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001908
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001909 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1910 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1911 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1912 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1913 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1914 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1915 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001916
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00001917 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
1918 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
1919 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
1920 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001921 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001922 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1923 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1924 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001925 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001926 } else {
1927 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001928 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
1929 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001930 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001931 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00001932 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
1933 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001934 return false;
1935 }
1936 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001937
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001938 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001939 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001940 } else {
1941 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001942 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
1943 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001944 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001945 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00001946 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
1947 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001948 return false;
1949 }
1950 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001951
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001952 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001953 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001954
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001955 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1956 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001957 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001958 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001959
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001960 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1961 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001962 if (IfBlock1)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001963 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001964 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001965 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001966 if (IfBlock2)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001967 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001968 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001969 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001970
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001971 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1972 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001973 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001974 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001975
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00001976 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
1977 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
1978 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001979 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001980 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001981
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001982 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1983 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1984 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1985 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001986 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1987 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001988 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001989 return true;
1990}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001991
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001992/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
1993/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001994/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001995static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001996 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001997 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1998 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1999 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2000 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2001 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002002
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002003 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2004 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2005 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002006 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002007 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002008 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002009 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002010
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002011 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002012 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2013 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2014 // branch into a return.
2015 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2016 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2017 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002018 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002019 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002020 return true;
2021 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002022
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002023 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2024 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2025 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2026 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002027
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002028 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2029 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2030 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2031 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2032 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2033 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2034 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002035
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002036 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2037 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2038 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2039 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2040 // safe.
2041 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2042 if (TCV->canTrap())
2043 return false;
2044 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2045 if (FCV->canTrap())
2046 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002047
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002048 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2049 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2050 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2051 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002052
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002053 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2054 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002055 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002056 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002057 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2058 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2059 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2060 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002061 TrueValue =
2062 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002063 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002064 }
2065
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002066 Value *RI =
2067 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002068
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002069 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002070
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002071 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002072 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002073 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002074
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002075 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2076
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002077 return true;
2078}
2079
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002080/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002081/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002082static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002083 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2084 return false;
2085 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
2086 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
2087 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2088 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2089 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2090 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2091 return true;
2092 }
2093 }
2094 return false;
2095}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002096
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002097/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2098/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2099/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2100static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2101 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2102 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2103 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2104 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2105 bool PredHasWeights =
2106 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2107 bool SuccHasWeights =
2108 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2109 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2110 if (!PredHasWeights)
2111 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2112 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2113 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2114 return true;
2115 } else {
2116 return false;
2117 }
2118}
2119
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002120/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2121/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2122/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002123bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002124 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002125
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002126 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002127 if (BI->isConditional())
2128 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2129 else {
2130 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2131 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2132 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2133 // predecessor.
2134 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2135 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2136 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2137 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2138 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002139 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002140 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002141 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2142 Cond = Curr;
2143 break;
2144 }
2145 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2146 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2147 return false;
2148 }
2149 }
2150
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002151 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002152 return false;
2153 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002154
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002155 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2156 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002157 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002158
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002159 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002160 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002161
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002162 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002163 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2164 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002165
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002166 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002167 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002168
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002169 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2170 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2171 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2172 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2173 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2174 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002175 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002176 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2177 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2178 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002179 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002180 return false;
2181 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2182 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2183 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2184 return false;
2185 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2186 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2187 // and Cond.
2188 ++NumBonusInsts;
2189 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2190 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2191 return false;
2192 }
2193
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002194 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2195 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2196 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2197 if (CE->canTrap())
2198 return false;
2199 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2200 if (CE->canTrap())
2201 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002202
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002203 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002204 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002205 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002206 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2207 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002208
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002209 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2210 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002211 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002212
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002213 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2214 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2215 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002216 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002217 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002218 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002219 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2220 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002221 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002222
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002223 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002224 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002225 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002226
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002227 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002228 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002229 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002230 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002231 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002232 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2233 Opc = Instruction::And;
2234 InvertPredCond = true;
2235 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2236 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2237 InvertPredCond = true;
2238 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002239 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002240 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002241 } else {
2242 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2243 continue;
2244 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002245
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002246 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002247 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002248
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002249 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2250 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002251 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002252
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002253 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2254 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2255 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2256 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002257 NewCond =
2258 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002259 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002260
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002261 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002262 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002263 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002264
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002265 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002266 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002267 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2268 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2269 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002270 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002271 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002272 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002273 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2274 continue;
2275 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2276 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002277 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002278 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002279
2280 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2281 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2282 // only given the branch precondition.
2283 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2284 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002285 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002286
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002287 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2288 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002289 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002290 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002291
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002292 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2293 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002294 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002295 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002296 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002297 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002298 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002299 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002300
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002301 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002302 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2303 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002304 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2305
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002306 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002307 bool HasWeights =
2308 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2309 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002310 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2311
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002312 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002313 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002314 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2315 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002316 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002317 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002318 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002319 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2320 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2321 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002322 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2323 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2324 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002325 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002326 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2327 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2328 }
2329 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002330 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002331 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2332 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002333 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002334 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002335 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2336 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2337 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2338 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002339 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2340 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002341 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2342 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2343 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002344 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2345 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2346 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2347
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002348 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2349 NewWeights.end());
2350 PBI->setMetadata(
2351 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2352 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002353 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002354 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002355 } else {
2356 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2357 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002358 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002359 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002360 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002361 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002362 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2363 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2364 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2365 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002366 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2367 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2368 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2369 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002370 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002371 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2372 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002373 } else {
2374 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2375 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2376 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002377 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2378 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002379 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002380 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2381 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2382 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2383 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002384 }
2385 }
2386 // Update PHI Node.
2387 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2388 MergedCond);
2389 }
2390 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2391 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2392 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2393 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002394 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002395
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002396 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2397 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2398
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002399 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2400 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2401 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2402 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002403
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002404 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002405 }
2406 return false;
2407}
2408
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002409// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2410// nullptr.
2411static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2412 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2413 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2414 if (!BB)
2415 continue;
2416 for (auto &I : *BB)
2417 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2418 if (S)
2419 // Multiple stores seen.
2420 return nullptr;
2421 else
2422 S = SI;
2423 }
2424 }
2425 return S;
2426}
2427
2428static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2429 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2430 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2431 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2432 //
2433 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2434 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2435 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2436 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2437 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2438 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2439 // one.
2440 //
2441 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2442 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2443 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2444 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2445 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002446
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002447 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2448 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2449 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2450 if (!AlternativeV)
2451 break;
2452
2453 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2454 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2455 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2456 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2457 break;
2458 PHI = nullptr;
2459 }
2460 if (PHI)
2461 return PHI;
2462
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002463 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2464 if (!AlternativeV &&
2465 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2466 return V;
2467
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002468 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002469 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2470 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2471 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002472 PHI->addIncoming(
2473 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002474 return PHI;
2475}
2476
2477static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2478 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2479 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2480 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2481 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2482 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2483 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2484 };
2485
2486 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2487 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2488 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2489 if (!BB)
2490 return true;
2491 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2492 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2493 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002494 unsigned N = 0;
2495 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2496 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2497 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2498 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2499 ++N;
2500 // Free instructions.
2501 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2502 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2503 continue;
2504 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002505 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002506 }
2507 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002508 };
2509
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002510 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2511 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2512 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002513 return false;
2514
2515 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2516 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2517 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2518 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2519 // testing.
2520 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2521 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2522 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2523 return false;
2524
2525 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2526 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2527 return false;
2528
2529 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2530 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2531 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2532 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2533 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2534 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2535 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2536 //
2537 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2538 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2539 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2540 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2541 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2542 return false;
2543 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2544 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2545 return false;
2546 if (QTB)
2547 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2548 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2549 return false;
2550 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2551 I != E; ++I)
2552 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2553 return false;
2554
2555 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2556 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2557 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2558 ->getCondition();
2559 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2560 ->getCondition();
2561
2562 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2563 PStore->getParent());
2564 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2565 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2566
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002567 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2568
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002569 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2570 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2571
2572 if (InvertPCond)
2573 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2574 if (InvertQCond)
2575 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2576 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2577
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002578 auto *T =
2579 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002580 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2581 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2582 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2583 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2584 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2585 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2586
2587 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2588 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002589
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002590 return true;
2591}
2592
2593static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2594 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2595 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2596 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2597 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2598 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2599 // PBI and QBI.
2600 //
2601 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2602 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2603 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2604 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2605 //
2606 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2607 //
2608 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2609 // / \ | \
2610 // PTB PFB | PFB
2611 // \ / | /
2612 // QBI QBI
2613 // / \ | \
2614 // QTB QFB | QFB
2615 // \ / | /
2616 // PostBB PostBB
2617 //
2618 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2619 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2620 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002621 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002622 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2623 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2624 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2625 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2626 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2627
2628 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2629 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2630 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2631 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2632 InvertPCond = true;
2633 }
2634 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2635 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2636 InvertQCond = true;
2637 }
2638
2639 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2640 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2641 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2642 PTB = nullptr;
2643 if (QTB == PostBB)
2644 QTB = nullptr;
2645
2646 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2647 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2648 // predecessor.
2649 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002650 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002651 };
2652 if (!PostBB ||
2653 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2654 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2655 return false;
2656 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2657 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2658 return false;
2659 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2660 return false;
2661
2662 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2663 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002664 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002665 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2666 if (!BB)
2667 continue;
2668 for (auto &I : *BB)
2669 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2670 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2671 }
2672 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2673 if (!BB)
2674 continue;
2675 for (auto &I : *BB)
2676 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2677 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2678 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002679
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002680 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2681 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2682 // clear what it contains.
2683 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2684
2685 bool Changed = false;
2686 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2687 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2688 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2689 return Changed;
2690}
2691
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002692/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2693/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002694/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2695/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002696static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2697 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002698 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2699 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002700
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002701 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002702 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002703 // this conditional branch redundant.
2704 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2705 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2706 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2707 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2708 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2709 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2710 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002711 BI->setCondition(
2712 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
2713 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002714 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002715
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002716 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2717 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2718 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2719 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002720 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002721 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2722 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2723 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002724 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2725 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2726 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002727 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002728 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002729 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
2730 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002731 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2732 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002733 NewPN->addIncoming(
2734 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
2735 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002736 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002737 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002738 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002739 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002740
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002741 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002742 return true;
2743 }
2744 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002745
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002746 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2747 if (CE->canTrap())
2748 return false;
2749
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002750 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2751 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2752 // merged store at the end.
2753 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2754 return true;
2755
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002756 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002757 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002758 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002759 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2760 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2761 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2762 ++BBI;
2763 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002764 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002765
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002766 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002767 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2768 PBIOp = 0;
2769 BIOp = 0;
2770 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2771 PBIOp = 0;
2772 BIOp = 1;
2773 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2774 PBIOp = 1;
2775 BIOp = 0;
2776 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2777 PBIOp = 1;
2778 BIOp = 1;
2779 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002780 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002781 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002782
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002783 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2784 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2785 // keep getting unwound.
2786 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2787 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002788
2789 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002790 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2791 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002792
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002793 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2794 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2795 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2796
2797 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002798 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002799 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
2800 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002801 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2802 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002803
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002804 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2805 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2806 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2807 if (CE->canTrap())
2808 return false;
2809
2810 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2811 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2812 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2813 if (CE->canTrap())
2814 return false;
2815 }
2816
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002817 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002818 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002819
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002820 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002821 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002822
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002823 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2824 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2825 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2826 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2827 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2828 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2829 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2830 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2831 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2832 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002833 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
2834 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002835 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2836 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002837 }
2838
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002839 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002840
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002841 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2842 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002843
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002844 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2845 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002846 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002847 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002848 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002849
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002850 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2851 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002852 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002853
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002854 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002855 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002856
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002857 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2858 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2859 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2860 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002861
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002862 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2863 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00002864 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002865 bool HasWeights =
2866 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2867 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00002868 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00002869 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2870 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2871 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2872 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002873 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2874 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2875 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002876 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2877 PredOther * SuccCommon,
2878 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00002879 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002880 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2881
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002882 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00002883 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2884 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002885 }
2886
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002887 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2888 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002889 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002890
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002891 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2892 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2893 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2894 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002895 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002896 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2897 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2898 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2899 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2900 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2901 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2902 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002903 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
2904 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002905 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00002906 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
2907 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
2908 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
2909 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002910 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00002911 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2912 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2913 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2914 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2915 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
2916 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
2917 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
2918 PredOther * SuccCommon};
2919
2920 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2921
2922 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2923 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2924 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
2925 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002926 }
2927 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002928
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002929 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2930 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002931
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002932 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2933 // one fewer predecessor.
2934 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002935}
2936
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002937// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
2938// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002939// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2940// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2941// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2942static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002943 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2944 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002945 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002946 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2947 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2948 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2949 // successor.
2950 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002951 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002952
2953 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00002954 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002955 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2956 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002957 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002958 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002959 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002960 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00002961 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
2962 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002963 }
2964
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002965 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2966 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2967
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002968 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002969 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002970 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2971 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2972 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002973 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002974 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002975 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2976 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002977 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2978 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2979 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002980 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
2981 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002982 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002983 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2984 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2985 // terminator must be unreachable.
2986 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2987 } else {
2988 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2989 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2990 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002991 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002992 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002993 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002994 else
2995 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002996 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002997 }
2998
2999 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3000 return true;
3001}
3002
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003003// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003004// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3005// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3006// unconditional otherwise.
3007static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3008 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3009 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3010 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3011 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3012 return false;
3013
3014 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3015 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003016 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3017 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003018
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003019 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3020 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3021 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3022 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3023 if (HasWeights) {
3024 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3025 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003026 TrueWeight =
3027 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3028 FalseWeight =
3029 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003030 }
3031 }
3032
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003033 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003034 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3035 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003036}
3037
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003038// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003039// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3040// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3041// with
3042// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3043static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3044 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3045 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3046 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3047 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3048 return false;
3049
3050 // Extract the actual blocks.
3051 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3052 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3053
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003054 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003055 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3056 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003057}
3058
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003059/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3060/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003061/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3062/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3063/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3064/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3065/// like:
3066///
3067/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3068/// DEFAULT:
3069/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3070/// br label %end
3071/// end:
3072/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003073///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003074/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3075/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003076static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003077 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3078 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3079 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003080 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003081
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003082 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3083 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003084 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3085 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003086
3087 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3088 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003089
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003090 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3091 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3092 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3093 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003094 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3095 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003096
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003097 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3098 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3099 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003100
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003101 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3102 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3103 // away.
3104 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3105 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3106 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3107 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003108
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003109 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003110 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003111 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3112 }
3113 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003114 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003115 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003116
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003117 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3118 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3119 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003120 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003121 Value *V;
3122 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3123 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3124 else
3125 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003126
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003127 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3128 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3129 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003130 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003131 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003132
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003133 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3134 // the block.
3135 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003136 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003137 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003138 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3139 return false;
3140
3141 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3142 // true in the PHI.
3143 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003144 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003145
3146 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3147 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3148
3149 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3150 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3151 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3152 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3153
3154 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3155 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003156 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3157 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003158 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3159 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3160 if (HasWeights) {
3161 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3162 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3163 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003164 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003165 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3166
3167 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003168 SI->setMetadata(
3169 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3170 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003171 }
3172 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003173 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003174
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003175 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003176 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3177 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3178 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003179 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3180 return true;
3181}
3182
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003183/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003184/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3185/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003186static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3187 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003188 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003189 if (!Cond)
3190 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003191
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003192 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3193 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3194 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003195
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003196 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003197 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3198 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003199 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003200 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3201 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3202 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003203
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003204 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003205 if (!CompVal)
3206 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003207
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003208 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3209 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3210 return false;
3211
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003212 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3213
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003214 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3215 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3216 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3217 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003218
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003219 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003220 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003221 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3222 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003223
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003224 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3225 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3226
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003227 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3228 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003229 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3230 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3231 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003232
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003233 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003234
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003235 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003236 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3237 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003238
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003239 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3240 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3241 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3242 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003243 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3244 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003245 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3246 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003247 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3248
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003249 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003250 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003251 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003252 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003253
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003254 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003255
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003256 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3257 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003258 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003259
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003260 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003261 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003262 BB = NewBB;
3263 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003264
3265 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003266 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3267 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003268 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3269 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003270 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003271
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003272 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003273 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003274
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003275 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3276 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3277 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003278
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003279 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3280 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3281 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003282 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003283 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3284 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003285 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003286 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3287 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003288
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003289 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3290 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003291
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003292 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003293 return true;
3294}
3295
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003296bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003297 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3298 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3299 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3300 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3301 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3302 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003303
3304 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003305}
3306
3307// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3308bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3309 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3310
3311 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3312 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3313 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003314 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003315 while (++I != E)
3316 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3317 return false;
3318
3319 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3320 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3321
3322 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003323 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3324 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003325 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3326 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3327
3328 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3329 // it has other dependents.
3330 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3331 continue;
3332
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003333 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003334 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3335 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3336 continue;
3337
3338 bool isTrivial = true;
3339
3340 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3341 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3342 while (++I != E)
3343 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3344 isTrivial = false;
3345 break;
3346 }
3347
3348 if (isTrivial)
3349 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3350 }
3351
3352 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003353 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3354 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003355
3356 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3357 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3358 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3359 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3360 // to remove them all.
3361 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3362 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3363
3364 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3365 PI != PE;) {
3366 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3367 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3368 }
3369
3370 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3371 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3372 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3373 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3374 // predecessors.
3375 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3376 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3377 }
3378
3379 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3380 if (pred_empty(BB))
3381 BB->eraseFromParent();
3382
3383 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3384}
3385
3386// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3387bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003388 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3389 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003390 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3391 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003392
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003393 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3394 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003395 while (++I != E)
3396 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3397 return false;
3398
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003399 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003400 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3401 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3402 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003403 }
3404
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003405 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3406 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003407 if (LoopHeaders)
3408 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003409 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003410}
3411
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003412static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003413 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3414 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3415 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3416 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3417 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3418 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3419 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3420 // simplified.
3421 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003422 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3423 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003424 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3425 return false;
3426
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003427 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003428 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003429 while (++I != E) {
3430 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3431 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003432 return false;
3433
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003434 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3435 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3436 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3437 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3438 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3439 break;
3440 default:
3441 return false;
3442 }
3443 }
3444
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003445 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3446 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003447 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003448 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003449
3450 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3451 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3452 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3453 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3454 // are both EH pads).
3455 if (UnwindDest) {
3456 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3457 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003458 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003459 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003460 I != IE; ++I) {
3461 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003462
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003463 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003464 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003465 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003466 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3467 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3468 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3469 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3470 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3471 // pad being removed.
3472 //
3473 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3474 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3475 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3476 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3477 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3478 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3479
3480 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3481 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3482
3483 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3484 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3485 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3486 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003487 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003488 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003489 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3490 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3491 }
3492 } else {
3493 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3494 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3495 // predecessors with this value.
3496 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3497 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3498 }
3499 }
3500 }
3501
3502 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003503 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003504 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3505 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003506 I != IE;) {
3507 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3508 // being moved to another block.
3509 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3510 if (PN->use_empty())
3511 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3512 // when we erase BB below.
3513 continue;
3514
3515 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3516 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3517 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3518 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3519 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3520 if (pred != BB)
3521 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3522 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3523 }
3524 }
3525
3526 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3527 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3528 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003529 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003530 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003531 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003532 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003533 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003534 }
3535 }
3536
3537 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3538 BB->eraseFromParent();
3539 return true;
3540}
3541
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003542// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3543static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3544 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3545 // with.
3546 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3547 if (!UnwindDest)
3548 return false;
3549
3550 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3551 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3552 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3553 return false;
3554
3555 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3556 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3557 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3558 return false;
3559
3560 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3561 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3562 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3563 // funclet bundle operands.
3564 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3565 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3566 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3567 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3568 // destination.
3569 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3570 RI->eraseFromParent();
3571
3572 return true;
3573}
3574
3575bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003576 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3577 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3578 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3579 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3580 return false;
3581
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003582 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003583 return true;
3584
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003585 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003586 return true;
3587
3588 return false;
3589}
3590
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003591bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003592 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003593 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
3594 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003595
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003596 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003597 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3598 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003599 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3600 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003601 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3602 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3603 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3604 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3605 else
3606 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3607 }
3608 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003609
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003610 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003611 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003612 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3613 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3614 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003615 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003616 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003617 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003618
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003619 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003620 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003621 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3622 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003623 if (LoopHeaders)
3624 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003625 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003626
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003627 return true;
3628 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003629
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003630 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3631 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3632 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3633 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3634 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003635
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003636 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3637 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3638 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003639 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003640 return true;
3641 }
3642 return false;
3643}
3644
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003645bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3646 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003647
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003648 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003649
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003650 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3651 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003652 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3653 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003654 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003655 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3656 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3657 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003658 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3659 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003660
3661 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003662 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003663 if (SI->isVolatile())
3664 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003665 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003666 if (LI->isVolatile())
3667 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003668 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003669 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3670 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003671 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003672 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3673 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003674 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
3675 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
3676 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
3677 // default.
3678 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
3679 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
3680 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
3681 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003682 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3683 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003684 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003685 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003686 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3687 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3688 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3689 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003690 }
3691
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003692 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3693 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3694 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003695 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003696 Changed = true;
3697 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003698
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003699 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3700 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003701 if (&BB->front() != UI)
3702 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003703
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003704 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003705 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3706 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003707 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003708 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003709 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3710 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3711 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3712 TI->eraseFromParent();
3713 Changed = true;
3714 }
3715 } else {
3716 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003717 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003718 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3719 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003720 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003721 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3722 Changed = true;
3723 }
3724 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003725 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003726 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
3727 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003728 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003729 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3730 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003731 --i;
3732 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003733 Changed = true;
3734 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003735 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3736 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3737 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3738 Changed = true;
3739 }
3740 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
3741 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3742 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3743 Changed = true;
3744 continue;
3745 }
3746
3747 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
3748 E = CSI->handler_end();
3749 I != E; ++I) {
3750 if (*I == BB) {
3751 CSI->removeHandler(I);
3752 --I;
3753 --E;
3754 Changed = true;
3755 }
3756 }
3757 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
3758 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
3759 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
3760 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
3761 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
3762 } else {
3763 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
3764 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
3765 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
3766 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
3767 }
3768 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
3769 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
3770 CSI->eraseFromParent();
3771 Changed = true;
3772 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003773 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003774 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3775 TI->eraseFromParent();
3776 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003777 }
3778 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003779
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003780 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003781 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003782 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3783 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003784 if (LoopHeaders)
3785 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003786 return true;
3787 }
3788
3789 return Changed;
3790}
3791
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003792static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3793 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3794
3795 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3796 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3797 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3798 return false;
3799 }
3800 return true;
3801}
3802
3803/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3804/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003805static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003806 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003807
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003808 bool HasDefault =
3809 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003810
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003811 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3812 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3813 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003814 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3815 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003816
3817 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3818 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003819 if (!DestA)
3820 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003821 if (Dest == DestA) {
3822 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3823 continue;
3824 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003825 if (!DestB)
3826 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003827 if (Dest == DestB) {
3828 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3829 continue;
3830 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003831 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003832 }
3833
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003834 assert(DestA && DestB &&
3835 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003836 assert(DestA != DestB);
3837 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3838 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3839 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3840
3841 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3842 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3843 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
3844 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
3845 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
3846 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
3847 ContiguousDest = DestA;
3848 OtherDest = DestB;
3849 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
3850 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
3851 ContiguousDest = DestB;
3852 OtherDest = DestA;
3853 } else
3854 return false;
3855
3856 // Start building the compare and branch.
3857
3858 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003859 Constant *NumCases =
3860 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003861
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003862 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3863 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003864 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
3865
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003866 Value *Cmp;
3867 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003868 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003869 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3870 else
3871 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003872 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003873
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003874 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003875 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
3876 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003877 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3878 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003879 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
3880 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
3881 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3882 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
3883 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
3884 else
3885 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
3886 }
3887 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
3888 TrueWeight /= 2;
3889 FalseWeight /= 2;
3890 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003891 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003892 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
3893 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
3894 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003895 }
3896 }
3897
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003898 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
3899 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3900 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003901 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
3902 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003903 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003904 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3905 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003906 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3907 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003908 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
3909 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003910 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
3911 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3912 }
3913
3914 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003915 SI->eraseFromParent();
3916
3917 return true;
3918}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003919
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003920/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003921/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003922static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
3923 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003924 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003925 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003926 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003927 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003928
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00003929 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
3930 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
3931 // bits are in the condition value.
3932 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
3933 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
3934
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003935 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003936 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00003937 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00003938 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
3939 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
3940 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00003941 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00003942 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003943 }
3944 }
3945
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003946 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
3947 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003948 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
3949 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003950 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003951 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
3952 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
3953 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00003954 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003955 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003956 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003957 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003958 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003959 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
3960 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003961 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
3962 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003963 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
3964 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
3965 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
3966 return true;
3967 }
3968
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003969 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3970 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3971 if (HasWeight) {
3972 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3973 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3974 }
3975
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003976 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00003977 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
3978 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003979 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003980 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003981 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003982 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003983 Weights.pop_back();
3984 }
3985
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003986 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003987 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003988 SI->removeCase(Case);
3989 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003990 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003991 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3992 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003993 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
3994 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003995 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003996
3997 return !DeadCases.empty();
3998}
3999
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004000/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4001/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004002/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4003/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4004/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4005static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004006 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004007 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004008 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004009 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004010 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004011
4012 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4013 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004014 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004015
4016 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4017
4018 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4019 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4020 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4021 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4022
4023 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004024 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4025 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004026
4027 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4028 return PHI;
4029 }
4030
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004031 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004032}
4033
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004034/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4035/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4036/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004037/// Returns true if a change is made.
4038static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004039 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004040 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4041
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004042 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4043 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004044 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4045 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004046
4047 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004048 PHINode *PHI =
4049 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4050 if (!PHI)
4051 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004052
4053 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4054 }
4055
4056 bool Changed = false;
4057
4058 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004059 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4060 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004061 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004062 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004063
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004064 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4065 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004066
4067 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4068 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4069 Changed = true;
4070 }
4071
4072 return Changed;
4073}
4074
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004075/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004076/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00004077static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004078 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4079 return false;
4080 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4081 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004082
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004083 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
4084 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
4085
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004086 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) || isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
4087 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) || isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
4088 isa<UndefValue>(C);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004089}
4090
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004091/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004092/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004093static Constant *
4094LookupConstant(Value *V,
4095 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004096 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4097 return C;
4098 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4099}
4100
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004101/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004102/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4103/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004104/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004105static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004106ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4107 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004108 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004109 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4110 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004111 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004112 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4113 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4114 if (A->isNullValue())
4115 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004116 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004117 }
4118
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004119 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4120 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4121 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4122 COps.push_back(A);
4123 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004124 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004125 }
4126
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004127 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004128 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4129 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004130 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004131
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004132 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004133}
4134
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004135/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004136/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004137/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004138/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004139static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004140GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004141 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004142 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
4143 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004144 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4145 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4146
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004147 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4148 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004149 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004150 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4151 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4152 ++I) {
4153 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4154 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
4155 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
4156 return false;
4157 Pred = CaseDest;
4158 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4159 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4160 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4161 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004162 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004163 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004164
4165 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4166 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4167 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4168 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4169 User *User = Use.getUser();
4170 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4171 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4172 continue;
4173 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4174 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4175 continue;
4176 return false;
4177 }
4178
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004179 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004180 } else {
4181 break;
4182 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004183 }
4184
4185 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4186 if (!*CommonDest)
4187 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4188 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4189 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4190 return false;
4191
4192 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4193 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4194 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4195 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4196 if (Idx == -1)
4197 continue;
4198
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004199 Constant *ConstVal =
4200 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004201 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004202 return false;
4203
4204 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
4205 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
4206 return false;
4207
4208 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4209 }
4210
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004211 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004212}
4213
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004214// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4215// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004216static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004217 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4218 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004219 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4220 if (I.first == Result) {
4221 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4222 return;
4223 }
4224 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004225 UniqueResults.push_back(
4226 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004227}
4228
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004229// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004230// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4231// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4232// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004233static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4234 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4235 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4236 Constant *&DefaultResult,
4237 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004238 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4239 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4240
4241 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4242 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4243 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
4244 DL))
4245 return false;
4246
4247 // Only one value per case is permitted
4248 if (Results.size() > 1)
4249 return false;
4250 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4251
4252 // Check the PHI consistency.
4253 if (!PHI)
4254 PHI = Results[0].first;
4255 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4256 return false;
4257 }
4258 // Find the default result value.
4259 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4260 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4261 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
4262 DL);
4263 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4264 // is unreachable.
4265 DefaultResult =
4266 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4267 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004268 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004269 return false;
4270
4271 return true;
4272}
4273
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004274// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4275// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004276// Example:
4277// switch (a) {
4278// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4279// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4280// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4281// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4282// default:
4283// return 4;
4284// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004285static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4286 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4287 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004288 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004289 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004290 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4291 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4292 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4293 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4294 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4295 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4296
4297 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4298 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4299 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4300 Value *const ValueCompare =
4301 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4302 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4303 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4304 }
4305 Value *const ValueCompare =
4306 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004307 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4308 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004309 }
4310
4311 return nullptr;
4312}
4313
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004314// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4315// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004316static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4317 Value *SelectValue,
4318 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4319 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4320 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4321 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4322 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4323
4324 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4325
4326 // Remove the switch.
4327 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4328 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4329
4330 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4331 continue;
4332 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4333 }
4334 SI->eraseFromParent();
4335}
4336
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004337/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004338/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4339/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4340static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004341 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004342 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4343 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4344 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4345 Constant *DefaultResult;
4346 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4347 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004348 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4349 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004350 return false;
4351 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4352 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4353 return false;
4354 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4355
4356 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004357 Value *SelectValue =
4358 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004359 if (SelectValue) {
4360 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4361 return true;
4362 }
4363 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4364 return false;
4365}
4366
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004367namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004368/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4369class SwitchLookupTable {
4370public:
4371 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4372 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4373 SwitchLookupTable(
4374 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4375 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4376 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004377
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004378 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4379 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4380 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004381
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004382 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4383 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4384 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4385 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004386
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004387private:
4388 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4389 // different ways.
4390 enum {
4391 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4392 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4393 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004394
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004395 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4396 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4397 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4398 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004399
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004400 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4401 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4402 // shift and mask operations.
4403 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004404
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004405 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4406 // instructions from the table.
4407 ArrayKind
4408 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004409
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004410 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4411 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004412
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004413 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4414 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4415 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004416
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004417 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4418 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4419 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004420
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004421 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4422 GlobalVariable *Array;
4423};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004424}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004425
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004426SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4427 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4428 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4429 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004430 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004431 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004432 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4433 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004434
4435 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004436 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004437
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004438 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4439
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004440 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004441 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004442 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4443 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4444 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004445 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004446
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004447 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004448 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4449
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004450 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004451 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004452 }
4453
4454 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004455 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004456 assert(DefaultValue &&
4457 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004458 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004459 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4460 if (!TableContents[I])
4461 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004462 }
4463
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004464 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004465 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004466 }
4467
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004468 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4469 // that single value.
4470 if (SingleValue) {
4471 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4472 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004473 }
4474
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004475 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4476 // table index.
4477 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4478 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4479 APInt PrevVal;
4480 APInt DistToPrev;
4481 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4482 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4483 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4484 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4485 if (!ConstVal) {
4486 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4487 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4488 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4489 break;
4490 }
4491 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4492 if (I != 0) {
4493 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4494 if (I == 1) {
4495 DistToPrev = Dist;
4496 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4497 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4498 break;
4499 }
4500 }
4501 PrevVal = Val;
4502 }
4503 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4504 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4505 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4506 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4507 ++NumLinearMaps;
4508 return;
4509 }
4510 }
4511
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004512 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004513 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004514 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004515 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4516 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4517 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004518 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4519 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4520 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4521 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4522 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004523 }
4524 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4525 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4526 Kind = BitMapKind;
4527 ++NumBitMaps;
4528 return;
4529 }
4530
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004531 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004532 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004533 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4534
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004535 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4536 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004537 "switch.table");
4538 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
4539 Kind = ArrayKind;
4540}
4541
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004542Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004543 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004544 case SingleValueKind:
4545 return SingleValue;
4546 case LinearMapKind: {
4547 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4548 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4549 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4550 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4551 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4552 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4553 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4554 return Result;
4555 }
4556 case BitMapKind: {
4557 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4558 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004559
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004560 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4561 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4562 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4563 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004564
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004565 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4566 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4567 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4568 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004569
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004570 // Shift down.
4571 Value *DownShifted =
4572 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4573 // Mask off.
4574 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
4575 }
4576 case ArrayKind: {
4577 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
4578 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4579 uint64_t TableSize =
4580 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
4581 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4582 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
4583 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4584 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004585
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004586 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
4587 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4588 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
4589 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4590 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004591 }
4592 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4593}
4594
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004595bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004596 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004597 Type *ElementType) {
4598 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004599 if (!IT)
4600 return false;
4601 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4602 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004603
4604 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004605 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004606 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004607 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004608}
4609
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004610/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4611/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004612static bool
4613ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4614 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4615 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004616 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4617 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004618
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004619 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004620 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004621 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4622 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004623
4624 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004625 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004626
4627 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004628 AllTablesFitInRegister =
4629 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
4630 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004631
4632 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4633 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4634 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4635 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004636 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004637 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004638
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004639 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4640 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4641 return true;
4642
4643 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4644 if (HasIllegalType)
4645 return false;
4646
4647 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4648 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4649 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4650 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004651}
4652
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004653/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4654/// \code
4655/// if (idx < tablesize)
4656/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4657/// else
4658/// r = default_value;
4659/// if (r != default_value)
4660/// ...
4661/// \endcode
4662/// Is optimized to:
4663/// \code
4664/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4665/// if (cond)
4666/// r = table[idx];
4667/// else
4668/// r = default_value;
4669/// if (cond)
4670/// ...
4671/// \endcode
4672/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004673static void reuseTableCompare(
4674 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
4675 Constant *DefaultValue,
4676 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004677
4678 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4679 if (!CmpInst)
4680 return;
4681
4682 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4683 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4684 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4685 return;
4686
4687 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4688 if (!CmpOp1)
4689 return;
4690
4691 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4692 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4693 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4694
4695 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4696 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4697 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4698 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4699 return;
4700
4701 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4702 // compare result.
4703 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4704 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004705 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004706 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4707 return;
4708 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4709 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4710 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004711
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004712 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4713 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4714 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4715 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4716 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4717 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4718 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4719 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4720 return;
4721 }
4722
4723 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4724 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4725 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4726 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4727 } else {
4728 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004729 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
4730 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4731 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004732 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4733 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4734 }
4735}
4736
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004737/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4738/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4739/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004740static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4741 const DataLayout &DL,
4742 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004743 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004744
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004745 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004746 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004747 return false;
4748
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004749 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4750 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4751
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004752 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4753 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4754 // string and lookup indices into that.
4755
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004756 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
4757 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004758 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4759 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004760 return false;
4761
4762 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004763 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004764 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4765 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4766 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4767 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4768
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004769 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004770 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
4771 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4772 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
4773 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
4774 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004775
4776 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4777 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4778 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4779 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4780 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4781 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4782
4783 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004784 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004785 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004786 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004787 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004788 return false;
4789
4790 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004791 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4792 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4793 Constant *Value = I.second;
4794 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4795 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4796 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004797 }
4798 }
4799
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004800 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004801 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004802 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4803 }
4804
4805 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4806 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4807 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4808 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4809
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004810 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4811 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004812 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004813 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004814 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004815
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004816 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4817 if (NeedMask) {
4818 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004819 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004820 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004821 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004822 return false;
4823 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004824
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004825 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4826 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4827 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004828 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004829 }
4830
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004831 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004832 return false;
4833
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004834 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004835 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004836 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
4837 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004838
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004839 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004840 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004841 Value *TableIndex =
4842 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004843
4844 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
4845 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004846 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004847 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004848 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
4849 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
4850 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
4851
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004852 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
4853 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
4854 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
4855 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
4856 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4857 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004858 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
4859
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004860 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004861 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004862 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
4863 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004864 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004865 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
4866 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
4867 RangeCheckBranch =
4868 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004869 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004870
4871 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4872 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004873
4874 if (NeedMask) {
4875 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4876 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4877 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4878 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4879 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004880 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
4881 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004882
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00004883 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
4884 // unnecessary illegal types.
4885 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
4886 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
4887 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004888 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004889 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4890 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004891 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
4892 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004893 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4894 }
4895 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4896
4897 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4898 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4899 // else continue with table lookup.
4900 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004901 Value *MaskIndex =
4902 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
4903 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
4904 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
4905 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004906 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4907
4908 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4909 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4910 }
4911
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004912 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
4913 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
4914 // do not delete PHINodes here.
4915 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
4916 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
4917 }
4918
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004919 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004920 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4921 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004922 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004923
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004924 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4925 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004926 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004927
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004928 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004929
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004930 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
4931 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004932 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
4933 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004934 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
4935 ReturnedEarly = true;
4936 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004937 }
4938
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004939 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
4940 // possible.
4941 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
4942 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
4943 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
4944 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
4945 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
4946 }
4947 }
4948
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004949 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004950 }
4951
4952 if (!ReturnedEarly)
4953 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
4954
4955 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004956 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004957 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004958
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004959 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004960 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004961 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4962 }
4963 SI->eraseFromParent();
4964
4965 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004966 if (NeedMask)
4967 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004968 return true;
4969}
4970
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004971bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004972 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
4973
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004974 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
4975 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4976 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
4977 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
4978 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004979 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004980
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004981 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
4982 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
4983 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004984 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004985
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004986 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
4987 // away into any preds.
4988 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
4989 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4990 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4991 ++BBI;
4992 if (SI == &*BBI)
4993 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004994 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004995 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004996
4997 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004998 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004999 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005000
5001 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005002 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5003 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005004
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005005 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
5006 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005007
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005008 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005009 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005010
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005011 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5012 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005013
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005014 return false;
5015}
5016
5017bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5018 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5019 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005020
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005021 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5022 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5023 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5024 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005025 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005026 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5027 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005028 --i;
5029 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005030 Changed = true;
5031 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005032 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005033
5034 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5035 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5036 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5037 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5038 return true;
5039 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005040
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005041 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5042 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5043 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5044 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5045 return true;
5046 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005047
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005048 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5049 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005050 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005051 }
5052 return Changed;
5053}
5054
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005055/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5056/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5057/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5058/// a shared handler.
5059///
5060/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5061/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5062/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5063/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5064/// sinking in this file)
5065///
5066/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5067/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5068/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5069/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5070/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5071/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5072///
5073/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5074/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5075/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5076static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5077 BasicBlock *BB) {
5078 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5079 assert(Succ);
5080 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5081 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5082 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5083 return false;
5084
5085 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5086 if (BB == OtherPred)
5087 continue;
5088 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5089 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5090 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5091 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005092 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5093 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005094 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5095 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5096 continue;
5097
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005098 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005099 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5100 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5101 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5102 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5103 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005104 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5105 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005106 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5107 }
5108
5109 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5110 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005111 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5112 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5113 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005114 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5115 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5116 }
5117
5118 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5119 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5120 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5121 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5122 }
5123
5124 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5125 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5126 BI->eraseFromParent();
5127 return true;
5128 }
5129 return false;
5130}
5131
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005132bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5133 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005134 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005135
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005136 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5137 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005138
5139 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5140 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005141 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5142 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5143 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5144 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005145 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005146 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005147 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005148 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5149 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005150
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005151 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5152 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5153 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5154 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5155 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5156 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005157 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005158 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
5159 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005160 return true;
5161 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005162
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005163 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5164 // equivalent.
5165 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005166 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5167 }
5168 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005169 return true;
5170 }
5171
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005172 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5173 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5174 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5175 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005176 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5177 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005178 return false;
5179}
5180
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005181static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5182 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5183 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5184 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5185 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5186 return nullptr;
5187 PredPred = PPred;
5188 }
5189 return PredPred;
5190}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005191
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005192bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005193 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005194
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005195 // Conditional branch
5196 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5197 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5198 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5199 // switch.
5200 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005201 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005202 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005203
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005204 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5205 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5206 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5207 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5208 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5209 ++I;
5210 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005211 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005212 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005213 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005214 ++I;
5215 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5216 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5217 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005218 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005219 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005220 }
5221 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005222
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005223 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005224 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005225 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005226
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005227 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5228 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5229 // of the BI branch.
5230 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5231 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5232 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5233 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5234 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5235 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5236 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5237 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5238 if (Implication) {
5239 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5240 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5241 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5242 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5243 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5244 BI->setCondition(CI);
5245 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
5246 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5247 }
5248 }
5249 }
5250
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005251 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5252 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5253 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005254 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5255 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005256
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005257 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5258 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5259 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5260 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005261 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5262 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005263 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
5264 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005265 } else {
5266 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005267 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005268 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5269 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5270 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005271 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
5272 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005273 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005274 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005275 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005276 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005277 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5278 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5279 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005280 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
5281 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005282 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005283
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005284 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5285 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5286 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5287 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005288 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005289 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005290
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005291 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005292 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5293 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005294 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005295 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005296 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005297
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005298 // Look for diamond patterns.
5299 if (MergeCondStores)
5300 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5301 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5302 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5303 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5304 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005305
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005306 return false;
5307}
5308
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005309/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5310static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5311 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5312 if (!C)
5313 return false;
5314
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005315 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005316 return false;
5317
5318 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005319 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005320 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005321
5322 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5323 // control flow (eg. calls)
5324 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005325 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005326 return false;
5327
5328 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5329 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5330 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5331 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5332
5333 // Look through bitcasts.
5334 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5335 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5336
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005337 // Load from null is undefined.
5338 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005339 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5340 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005341
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005342 // Store to null is undefined.
5343 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005344 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005345 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5346 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005347 }
5348 return false;
5349}
5350
5351/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005352/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005353static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5354 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5355 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5356 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5357 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5358 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5359 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5360 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5361 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5362 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5363 // destination from conditional branches.
5364 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5365 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5366 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005367 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5368 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005369 BI->eraseFromParent();
5370 return true;
5371 }
5372 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5373 }
5374
5375 return false;
5376}
5377
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005378bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005379 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005380
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005381 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005382 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005383
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005384 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5385 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005386 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005387 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005388 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5389 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5390 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005391 }
5392
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005393 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5394 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005395 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005396
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005397 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5398 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5399
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005400 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5401 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5402
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005403 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5404 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5405 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5406 //
5407 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5408 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005409
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005410 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5411
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005412 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5413 // eliminate it, do so now.
5414 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5415 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005416 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005417
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005418 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005419 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005420 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005421 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5422 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005423 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005424 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5425 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005426 }
5427 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005428 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5429 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005430 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005431 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5432 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005433 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005434 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5435 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5436 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005437 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005438 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5439 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005440 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005441 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5442 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5443 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005444 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005445 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5446 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5447 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005448 }
5449
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005450 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005451}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005452
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005453/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5454/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005455/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5456/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5457///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005458bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005459 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
5460 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005461 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005462 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
5463 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005464}